|
Monday June 22, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday June 23, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday June 24, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday June 25, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Friday June 26, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Monday June 29, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday June 30, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 1, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 2, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 1 - Session 1 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 1Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 3, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 6, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 7, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 8, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 9, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 10, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 13, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 14, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Wednesday July 15, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Thursday July 16, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Preschool Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 2 - Session 2 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 2Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Friday July 17, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Monday July 20, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Pre-School Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Pre-School Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
Tuesday July 21, 2026
|
|
7:30 AM - 9:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Super Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
9:00 AM - 10:00 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:00 AM - 10:30 AM
|
2026 Middlebury Marlins Swim Team - Mini Marlins
MIDDLEBURY SWIM TEAM
TEAM STORE/PORTAL LINK: https://metroswimshop.com/pages/team-account?teamid=MIDD
Team ID: 84026
Coaches: Carina Bellmann, Monica Benjamin, Elizabeth HardingContact Information: middleburyswimteam@gmail.comDates and times: June 15 – July 31 Monday-FridaySuper Marlins: 7:30–9:00 AMMarlins: 9:00–10:00 AMMini Marlins: 10:00–10:30 AMSuper Marlins Optional Monday &Wednesday Evening Skills Review 7:00–8:00 PMRegistration opens May 5, 5:30PM Registration closes May 29, 5:30PMDual meets are held on Tuesday and Thursday Evenings. Meets start at 6:00pm. Location: Middlebury Town PoolFees: Super Marlins: $275 ($343.75 non-res.) Marlins:$250 ($312.50 non-res.) Mini Marlins: $200 ($250 non-res.) Scholarships are available - for more scholarship information, please call 802-458-8015 Dual-meets (two-team competitions) are held on Tuesday and Thursday evenings from the end of June until the end of July. Meets start at 6pm**A distance meet is held July 11th to provide swimmers with the opportunity to qualify for distance events at the State Championship meet. All swimmers are encouraged to attend. More info to come later. Qualifying swim team members may choose to compete at The Champlain Valley Swim League Championship Meet and the Vermont State Championship at UVAC in White River Junction. Dates will be finalized later. Looking for a fun way to meet great families, develop a lifelong sport, be a part of a team, and make the most of your summer? Come join the Middlebury Swim Team! The team is divided into skill-level practice groups so each swimmer can develop at a comfortable pace. Not sure which practice group is right for your swimmer? Not to worry, MIDD coaches will help swimmers and their parents find their best fit! Mini Marlins: swimmers ages 5-8 with a competitive spirit and the need for experience. They will continue to improve rhythmic breathing and competitive stroke skills. As skills improve, swimmers are encouraged to compete in meets. Swimmers who can swim 25 yards independently are welcome to join this group. Marlins: experienced 8 & under, 9–10-year-old, and newer 11–12-year-old swimmers. Emphasis is placed on stroke development, correct technique, and building swimming endurance. Competitive preparation is introduced. Swimmers should plan to participate in swim meets. Super Marlins: 13-year-old and older swimmers, 11 & 12-year-old at the coaches’ discretion. Emphasis is placed on intensive water training with a continued focus on endurance, commitment, and competition. Stroke technique is reviewed as necessary, and race strategy is reinforced. All Super Marlins serve as role models for younger teammates and are expected to participate in swim meets. Apparel: Team suits are not required but may be purchased. More to come later. Super Marlins swimmers are encouraged to bring their own fins, snorkels and paddles to practice.Parents: Parents are asked to volunteer at swim meets. From scorers to concessions, timers to ribbon distribution, there is something for everyone and a way for all to contribute to the fun and success of our team.*Swimtopia is the primary means of communication. This swim management tool is used by coaches to send weekly updates as well as to enter swimmers in meets. Please download and familiarize yourself with this free application prior to the season starting.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 2 (B)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 3 (C)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
10:30 AM - 11:00 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Pre-School Level 2 (G)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 1 (A)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Level 4 (D)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:00 AM - 11:30 AM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Pre-School Level 1 (F)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Flex 1 (H)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Flex 2 (I)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
11:30 AM - 12:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Swim Lessons Session 3 - Session 3 Parent & Child (E)
Swim Lessons Session 3Registration opens Tuesday, May 5th @5:30pm. Lessons are held Monday-Thursday. Fridays are reserved as a make-up day for cancellations due to weather. Private Lessons: Private and semi-private lessons are available upon request. Arrangements are made through pool staff. Fees: $130.00- Resident $162.50- Non-ResidentParent and Child - for ages 6 months to 36 months (must be accompanied by an adult) This class will teach your child to become more comfortable in water, so they are willing and ready to learn to swim. Basic skills taught include adjusting to water environment, comfort holding a front or back position in water and demonstrating breath control (blowing bubbles. etc.). Preschool Aquatics (3 Levels) Ages 3 and up. Designed to give children a positive, developmentally appropriate aquatic learning experience. Level 1 helps orient young preschool children to aquatic environment and gain basic skills. Level 2 helps children gain greater independence in the water using basic skills, Level 3 helps children to gain basic swimming propulsion skills to be comfortable in and around water. Each level must be completed before advancing to the next level. Learn-To-Swim (Levels 1 and 2) – Ages 6 and up Instructors will teach swimmers’ ability and confidence. Level 1: Focuses on skills such as water entry and exit, bobbing, blowing bubbles through nose and mouth, opening eyes underwater and retrieving objects. Level 1 must be passed to move to the next level.Level 2: Participants must be able to perform kicks, basic arm strokes and be comfortable with face in water. This level focuses on jumping feet first into the water, fully submerging and holding breath, floating face down in the water, back float, changing direction while swimming on front and back and continued work on swimming on front and back. Level 2 must be completed before advancing to Level 3.Level 3 - Stroke Development: Builds on previously learned skills by providing additional practice. Participants learn the survival float, front crawl with rotary breath and elementary backstroke. Headfirst entry into water is introduced and treading skills are improved with scissor and dolphin kicks. Level 3 must be passed before advancing to level 4. Level 4 - Stroke Improvement: Develops participants’ confidence in the strokes learned in Level 3 and improves other aquatic skills. In Level 4, participants improve their skills and increase their endurance by swimming familiar strokes (front crawl, elementary backstroke) for greater distances. Participants also learn the back crawl, breaststroke and butterfly and the basics of turning at a wall. Level 4 must be completed to advance to level 5. Level 5 - Stroke Refinement: Participants refine their performance of all strokes and increase their distances. Flip turns on the front and back are also introduced. Diving is refined. Level 5 must be completed to advance to level 6.Level 6 - Swimming and Skill Proficiency: The objectives of this level, the final level of the American Red Cross learn-to-swim program, are to refine the strokes so participants can swim them with ease, efficiency, power, and smoothness while going greater distances.
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Adult Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Family Pool Pass (Up to 6 People)
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:00 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Senior Citizens Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|
|
1:00 PM - 8:30 PM
|
2026 Summer Pool Pass - Youth Pool Pass
Daily FeesYouth (15 and younger) - $5.00Adults (16+) - $7.00Senior Citizens (55+)-$4.00 Season PassesYouth $75 (Non-Resident $93.75)Adult $90 (Non-Resident $112.50)Family- Up to 6 people $150.00 (Non-Resident $187.50)Senior Citizens (55+) $50 (Non-Resident $62.50)Operating ScheduleJUNE 15th- AUGUST 23rd (schedule subject to change)7:30am-10:30am- Swim Team Practice10:30am-12:00pm- Swim Lessons 12:15pm-1:00pm Adult Lap Swim1:00pm-4:45pm- Camp/Open Swim4:45pm-5:30pm- Adult Lap Swim5:30pm-7:00pm- Family Swim7:00pm-8:00pm - Swim Team Skills PracticeKiddie Pool: 5 years and younger is open from 12:15pm-8:00pm **Adult Supervision Required
|
|
|
|